Yamaha HTR-3065 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
English
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FEATURES 5
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PREPARATIONS 11
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 29
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
PLAYBACK 33
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
En 3
CONFIGURATIONS 54
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Setupmenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 65
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
APPENDIX 67
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Accessories En 4
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model.
• (Australia model only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for
Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
• High-quality sound from iPod via
digital connection
. p.44
• Playback of music stored on USB
devices
. p.48
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
USB deviceiPod
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
The unit’s
remote control
TV remote control
Audio
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.75
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.
Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic
spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the
speaker settings to suit your room
(YPAO)
. p.29
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)
. p.36
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed
Music Enhancer)
. p.39
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.34
The ECO mode
(power saving function)
allows you to create an
eco-friendly home
theater system
. p.63
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.23)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
The HDMI jacks supports 3D and 4K video transmission
(through output).
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑ Creating high-realistic sound fields (p.36)
CINEMA DSP allows you to create a natural and realistic
sound field in your own room.
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.40)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view
information, or easily configure the settings using the
on-screen menu.
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
Set-top box
TV
CD player
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.61).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.59).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, French, German, Spanish,
Russian and Chinese (p.28).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware (p.66).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Scene settings (p.34)
• Sound/video settings and signal information for each
source (p.51)
• Various function settings (p.55)
• System settings (p.65)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7
Front panel
1 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.29).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.4).
4 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.33).
5 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.41).
6 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.42).
7 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.40).
8 TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.40).
9 Front display
Displays information (p.8).
0 PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
A INPUT keys
Select an input source.
B TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.52).
C SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.34).
D PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.35).
E STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.38).
F VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.26).
G USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.48) or an iPod
(p.44).
H VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
YPAO MIC
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
VIDEO
VOLU ME
AUX USB
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone 5V 1A
AUDI O
394521 678
:
HBDE
GFAC
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.36) is working.
3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39) is
working.
4 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.52) is working.
5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
6 iPod CHARGE
Lights up when the iPod is being charged while the unit is in
standby mode (p.44).
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
9 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
0 Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
A Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.33).
B Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
SW
C
LR
SL SR
VOL.
MUTE
iPod
ENHANCER
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
TUNED
CHARGE
SLEEP
SBL SBR
OUT
123467895
: >A B
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9
Rear panel
1 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
2 HDMI 1–4 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
3 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26).
4 MONITOR OUT (component video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.22).
5 AV 1–5 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
6 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.27).
7 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.25).
8 AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio to a recording device (such as tape
deck) (p.27).
9 MONITOR OUT (composite video) jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.22).
0 SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15).
A SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.15).
B VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.27).
C Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.27).
FRONT
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
78 0 A B49 C6
213
5
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Lights up when remote control signals are transmitted.
3 SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks
AV 1–5 AV 1–5 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
5 MODE key
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception (p.40).
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.46).
6 Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.40).
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
7 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.33).
8 Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.35).
9 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.34).
0 SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.54).
A Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
B External device operation keys
Control playback of the iPod (p.45) or USB storage device
(p.48).
C RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
D OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.51).
E VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
F MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
• (Australia model only)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
C
D
E
F
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
:
A
B
PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.12)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.15)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.18)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.23)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting recording devices (p.27)
Connect recording devices to the unit.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.27)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.28)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.29)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 12
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 .
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the
number of channels)
5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●●
Front (R) 2 ●●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround right/left channel sounds.
●●
Surround (R) 5 ●●
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
●●●●
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5.1-channel system
4.1-channel system
3.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
45
12
39
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
9
10° to 30°10° to 30°
12
39
12
9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14
■ Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
z (power)
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for a
5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems,
connect speakers while referring to the connection
diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
5.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
(Connecting front speakers)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
FRONT
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
1 2
Speaker connections
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16
(Connecting center/surround speakers)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Press down the tab.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the
terminal.
d Release the tab.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
ROU
ND
CENTER
aa
b
c
d
+ (red)
- (black)
Audio pin cable
1 2
Speaker connections
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 17
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is
required.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output)
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
AV 4
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
Digital Optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 18
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.59) in the “Setup” menu.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or
configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
3 Connecting a TV
When connecting a video device with an analog video output
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also
need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the
unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
■ Connection Method 3 (p.21)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.20)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.18)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.22)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.75).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTIC
A
(
TV
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
A
V
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HD
M
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press SETUP.
d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
e Press ENTER again.
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
g Press SETUP.
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-
compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20).
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
O
PTIO
N
R
ET
U
R
N
V
O
LU
M
E
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.59) in the “Setup” menu.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or
configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press SETUP.
c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
d Press ENTER again.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
f Press SETUP.
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
O
PTIO
N
R
ET
U
R
N
V
O
LU
M
E
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-
compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or
if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”
(p.60) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.34),
you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,
the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or
configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO) of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio
will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit
(rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
VIDEO
V
V
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
MONITOR OUT
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.44)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.48)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.18 to 21).
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22).
4 Connecting playback devices
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–4 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 1
AV 2
O
O
C
C
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–5, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
OUT
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–4
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–4
AV 5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
A
O
U
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HD
M
HDMI
OUT
ARC
AV 5
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be
used).
6
Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–5 or AUDIO 1–2, the audio played back
on the audio device will be output from the unit.
VOL.
AudioIn
VOL.
AudioAV5
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
A
AV 4
E
NT
ITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–5 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 26
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as
camcorders and portable audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).
• You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.44) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.48).
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
VIDEO
AUX USB
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone 5V 1A
AUDI O
V
Portable audio player
Camcorder
The unit (front)
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
FRONT
AV
5
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
AV 4
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5
FM/AM antenna connections
6 7 8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 27
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks.
These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5 jacks or VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5 jacks, AUDIO 1–2 jacks, or
VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
6 Connecting recording devices
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV
5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
AUDIO
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
AV
OUT
VIDEO
V
V
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording
device
Audio
recording
device
Audio input
AUDIO OUT jacks
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
FRONT
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SURROUND CENTER
SPEAKERS
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
-
120V
220V
-
240V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
FRONT
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Recording device connections
7
Power cable connection
8 9
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 28
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Language setting
9
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 29
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the cross-over frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following screen appears on the TV.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
12
3
9
45
The unit (front)
YPAO microphone
Listening
position
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Automatic speaker setup
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 30
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the
cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.
• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.31).
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/
subwoofer)
2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3 Adjustment range of speaker output level
4 Warning message (if available)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.31) or “Warning messages” (p.32).
• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.
6
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1
2
3
4
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / 10.0 dB
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / 10.0 dB
SAVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 31
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle errors
1
Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.
c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
ERROR
E-5:Noisy
PROCEED
5%
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
E-5:NOISY
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Automatic speaker setup
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle warnings
1
Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / 10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
W-1:PHASE
Problem speaker (blinks)
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be connected with
the reverse polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If
the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Automatic speaker setup
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 33
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/
DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.40)
• Playing back iPod music (p.44)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.48)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.52).
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
Basic playback procedure
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–4
AV 1–5
AUDIO 1–2
V-AUX
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
USB
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit
is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.43).
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
AudioDecoder
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
Information
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
FM
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
TUNER
S
LEEP
M
O
DE
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
INFO
VOLUME
MUTE
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 34
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just
one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.60) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.33)
• Select a sound program (p.35)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
• (For Australia model only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of
the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. Refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input
Sound
program
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
SCENE link
playback
BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off On
TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On On
CD AV 3 STRAIGHT Off Off
RADIO TUNER
MUSIC
(5ch Stereo)
On Off
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SETComplete
VOL.
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
SCENE
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 35
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.36)
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo
playback (p.37)
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
Selecting a surround decoder (p.39)
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
Switching to the straight decode mode (p.38)
Press STRAIGHT.
Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39)
Press ENHANCER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM on the front panel.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or
playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.38) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8).
Selecting the sound mode
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 36
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.52) in the “Option” menu.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 37
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
5ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side
speakers.
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Enjoying unprocessed sounds in original
channels (straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, each speaker
produces its own channel audio signal (without sound field
processing). When you play back 2-channel sources, such as a CD
player, stereo sound is heard from the front speakers. When you
play back multichannel sources, the unit produces unprocessed
multichannel sounds.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
STRAIGHT
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39
■ Enjoying unprocessed multichannel
sounds (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.73).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.61)
in the “Setup” menu.
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.52) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLII Movie
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
movies.
bPLII Music
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
music.
bPLII Game
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
games.
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
“ENHANCER” lights up
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
TRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 40
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your listening environment, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM or AM to select a band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the
frequency currently selected is displayed.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.53) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM/AM radio
z (power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
TUFM50/AM9
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
P
RESE
T
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
MODE
TUNING
FM
AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 41
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.40)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
VOL.
AutoPreset
VOL.
01:FM87.50MHz
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
VOL.
AutoPreset
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
I
NF
O
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 42
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET
VOL.
ClearPreset
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset station to be cleared
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:Cleared
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
PRESET
FM
AM
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 43
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.41).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
Traffic information station (frequency)
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
INFO
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 44
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means
both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software
version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect
your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to
standby mode while the iPod is connected, the iPod continues to charge (up
to 4 hours).
Playing back iPod music
Supported iPods (as of October 2011)
• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.), iPod classic
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
VIDEO
VOLU ME
AUX USB
STRAIGHT
RADIO
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone 5V 1A
AUDI O
The unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
iPodConnected
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 45
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.46).
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the display to the browse screen during playback, press the cursor
key (e).
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to
the simple play mode (p.46).
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.47) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
1/ 2
Music
Video
iPod
Top
Artist Name
Album Title
Song Title
2:30
iPod
Now Playing
5:10
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
1
4
5
2
3
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
1/ 6
iPod
Music
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 46
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.47) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
iPod
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Title
Song Title
2:30
5:10
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 47
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs
(Songs)
Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 48
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT
32 format, except USB HDDs).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files.
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 48 kHz.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
VIDEO
VOLU ME
AUX USB
STRAIGHT
RADIO
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone 5V 1A
AUDI O
USB
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
USBConnected
USB
1/ 12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
RET
UR
N
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
ENTE
R
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 49
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch the display to the browse screen during playback, press the cursor
key (e).
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/random settings (p.50) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Artist Name
Album Title
Song Title
2:30
USB
Now Playing
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
1/ 12
USB
Top
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
O
PTI
O
N
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 50
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/random settings (p.50) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Repeat/random settings
You can configure the repeat/random settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) and
press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause or starts playback of
the previously selected song.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
USB
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Title
Song Title
2:30
Setting Function
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears
on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album (folder)
repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen.
Random
(Random)
Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears on the
TV screen.
123 4
123 4
512
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TUNER
SLEEP
USB
MODE
V-AUX
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
2
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
1
5
2
FM
I
NF
O
MEM
O
RY
AM
P
RESE
T
T
UNIN
G
S
CE
N
E
S
ET
U
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
BD
DV
D
T
V
C
D
R
AD
I
O
MU
T
E
T
RAN
S
MI
T
RECEIVER
HDM
I
AV
AUDI
O
TUNER
S
LEEP
US
B
M
O
DE
V-
AU
X
MOVIE MUSI
C
S
UR. DECOD
E
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 51
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
ToneControl
OPTION
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
52
DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround)
DSP Level
(DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level. 52
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
52
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 52
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 52
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume during playback. 53
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu.
53
Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 53
Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input
source with an audio jack of others.
53
Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 53
Auto Preset (Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
41
Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 42
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
43
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.47) or
USB storage device (p.50).
—
Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod. 47
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 52
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)
Default
0 dB
❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.39).
Settings
Default
USB, TUNER: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 53
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume during playback.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.61) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
■ Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
■ Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV 5”, “AUDIO 1”, or “AUDIO 2”, and connect the device to the unit’s
corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■ Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.
Settings
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) (default) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/
LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.
Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal
Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal
Off (Off) (default) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–5,
V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 54
CONFIGURATIONS
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 55
Setupmenu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 57
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 57
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 57
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 57
Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 57
Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 58
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 58
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 58
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 58
Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 58
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 59
HDMI Configuration
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 59
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 59
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 60
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 60
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 60
SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 60
Sound
DSP Parameter
Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 61
Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 61
Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 61
Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 61
Lipsync
Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 61
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 62
Vol ume
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 62
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 62
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 62
ECO
Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 62
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 63
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 56
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 63
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 64
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 64
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 64
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 57
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
❑ Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
❑ Crossover
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100H z, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Use (default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 58
❑ Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the
subwoofer phase.
Settings
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Surround L, Surround R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
■ Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
❑ EQ Select
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.29).
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
the desired speaker channel.
Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Off (default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-
frequency components.
PEQ
Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.29).
GEQ (default)
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 59
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor
keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ Configuration
❑ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.75).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.75) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
GEQ
Front L
Back:RETURN
EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Configuration
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 60
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ SCENE
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected
to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO
Settings
Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
CD, RADIO: Off
• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend
using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default)
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 61
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
❑ Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is
enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a
spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is
effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Settings
❑ Center Width
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 7
Default
3
❑ Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to
strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
-3 to +3
Default
0
❑ Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher
to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken
(more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 1.0
Default
0.3
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.53) in the “Option” menu.
❑ Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
DSP Parameter
Lipsync
Volume
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 62
❑ Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
■ Volume
Configures the volume settings.
❑ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
❑ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off (default)
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Auto Power Down
ECO Mode
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 63
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption by
keeping the maximum volume, maximum output power, or front display’s brightness
low.
Settings
• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2, USB, V-AUX
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press
ENTER.
• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3
To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.
Off (default) Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
Input Rename
Dimmer
Memory Guard
Input Rename
Blu-ray
HDMI1
OK:ENTER
CANCEL:RETURN
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 64
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.63) is set to “On”.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the following icon ( ) is displayed on the menu screen.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Memory Guard
Memory Guard On
Back:RETURN
Icon
English (default) English
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Chinese
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
Français
Deutsch
Español
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 65
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z
(power).
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
• (Australia model only)
For information on how to change the remote control ID of the remote control, refer to “Supplement for
Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3
seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3
seconds.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
65
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 65
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
66
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 66
INIT Restores the default settings. 66
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 66
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 66
z (power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
6 MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 MIN (default)
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
SPIMP.8MIN
REMOTEIDID1
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 66
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your listening
environment.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. For details, refer
to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Save the downloaded firmware to the root folder of a USB memory device.
2
Press PROGRAM on the front panel to select “UPDATE”.
3
Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack.
4
To start firmware update, press INFO on the front panel.
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
TUFM50/AM9
TVFORMATNTSC
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
INITCANCEL
UPDATEUSB
VERSIONxx.xx
APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 67
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.29). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.57).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.62).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.62).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.75). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the
front display when selecting an input source...
By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.63) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.64).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.65).
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 68
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power and system
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.15).
The unit enters
standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu
to “Off” (p.62).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.65).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.15).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 69
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.62).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, select “5ch Stereo” (p.35).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.57).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.58).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.58).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.29) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.57).
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.59).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.60).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.60). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 70
Video
FM/AM radio
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This
may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.76).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.40).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 71
USB
Remote control
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.40).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.40).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.41).
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT 16 or FAT 32. Use a USB device with FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The folder structure not supported by the unit is applied.
The unit supports folder hierarchies of up to eight levels and up to 65,000 files per
level. If necessary, modify the folder structure on your USB device.
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.65).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 72
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Connect error The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.65).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.44).
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 73
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
most BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and Blu-ray discs.
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
Glossary
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 74
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 75
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.34)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
(Example)
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT VIDEO
in
VIDEO in
COMPONENT VIDEO
out
VIDEO out
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 76
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.59) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby
Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”).
3
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital
Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals)
• 576p/50 Hz • 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals)
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 77
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
FRONT
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
(
CD
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
AV 4
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 78
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes
software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 79
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 5, AUDIO 1–2, V-AUX [Mini Jack])
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 4 (AV 3–5, V-AUX)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4)
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)
Subwoofer Out x 1
AV OUT x 1
AUDIO OUT x 1
Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
- 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz
• Audio Format
- Dolby Digital
-DTS
- DSD 6ch
- Dolby Digital Plus
-Dolby TrueHD
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS Express
- PCM 2ch to 8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )
Front L/R.....................................................................100 W/ch
Center ........................................................................100 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................100 W/ch
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R................................................................. 85 W+85 W
Center ...............................................................................85 W
Surround L/R .......................................................... 85 W+85 W
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6
)
[Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch
Center ........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ..................................110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
Front L/R (6/4/2 ) ............................................110/130/150 W
Specifications
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 80
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 ................................................................................ 0.23 dB
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 )..............................200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 k
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 k
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ) .............................100 mV/470
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 kHz to 100 kHz) ....................... +0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc.
(Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
..........................................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC
[Other models] ................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75
Component
Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75
Cb/Cr ............................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ............................................................................... 72 dB
Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono .................................................................................0.3%
Stereo ................................................................................0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................75 unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model].................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..............................250 W/320 VA
[Other models]................................................................250 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[General model]................................................... 0.5 W or less
[Other models]..................................................... 0.3 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models].............................................470 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
............................435 x 151 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6” x 12-3/8”)
• Weight .............................................................7.5 kg (16.5 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 81
Numerics
2ch Stereo .................................................37
5ch Stereo, CINEMA DSP .........................37
A
Accessories ................................................4
Action Game, CINEMA DSP .....................36
Adaptive DRC, option menu .....................52
Adjustment, setup menu ...........................62
ADVANCED SETUP menu ........................65
Adventure, CINEMA DSP ..........................36
AM antenna connection ............................26
AM radio listening .....................................40
ARC ...........................................................18
ARC, setup menu ......................................60
Audio device connection ..........................25
Audio In, option menu ...............................53
AUDIO jack ...............................................17
Audio Output, setup menu ........................59
Audio Return Channel ...............................18
Auto Power Down, setup menu .................62
Auto Preset, FM/AM radio .........................41
Automatic speaker settings optimizing .....29
C
Cellar Club, CINEMA DSP ........................37
Center Image, setup menu .......................61
Center Width, setup menu ........................61
Center, setup menu ..................................57
Chamber, CINEMA DSP ...........................37
CINEMA DSP ............................................36
COAXIAL jack ...........................................17
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ........................17
Compressed Music Enhancer ..................39
Configuration, setup menu ..................57, 59
Connecting AM antenna .......................... 26
Connecting audio device ......................... 25
Connecting FM antenna ........................... 26
Connecting power cable .......................... 27
Connecting recording device .................. 27
Connecting speakers ............................... 15
Connecting subwoofer ............................. 16
Connecting to jack on front panel ............ 26
Connecting TV ......................................... 18
Connecting video devices ....................... 23
Crossover, setup menu ............................ 57
D
Dimension, setup menu ........................... 61
Dimmer, setup menu ................................ 64
Distance, setup menu .............................. 58
Drama, CINEMA DSP ............................... 36
DSP Level, option menu ........................... 52
DSP Parameter, setup menu .................... 61
DSP/Surround, option menu ..................... 52
Dynamic Range, setup menu .................. 62
E
ECO, setup menu ..................................... 62
Enhancer, option menu ............................ 52
EQ Select, setup menu ............................ 58
Equalizer, setup menu ............................. 58
Error message, YPAO .............................. 31
Extra Bass, setup menu ........................... 58
F
FM antenna connection ........................... 26
FM radio listening ..................................... 40
Frequency steps setting .......................... 40
Front display ........................................ 8, 33
Front panel ................................................. 7
Front panel jack connection ..................... 26
Front, setup menu .................................... 57
Function, setup menu ............................... 63
G
Glossary ................................................... 73
H
Hall in Munich, CINEMA DSP ................... 37
Hall in Vienna, CINEMA DSP .................... 37
HDMI Control ............................................ 75
HDMI Control, setup menu ....................... 59
HDMI jack ................................................. 17
HDMI OUT (TV), setup menu ................... 60
HDMI signal compatibility ........................ 76
HDMI, setup menu ................................... 59
I
In.Trim, option menu ................................ 52
Information switching
on the front display .............................. 33
INIT, ADVANCED SETUP menu ............... 66
Initial Volume, setup menu ....................... 62
Input Rename, setup menu ...................... 63
Input Trim, option menu ........................... 52
iPod music playback ................................ 44
L
Language selection, on-screen menu ..... 28
Language, setup menu ............................ 64
Level, setup menu .................................... 58
Lipsync, option menu ............................... 53
Lipsync, setup menu ................................ 61
Listening to AM radio ............................... 40
Listening to FM radio ................................ 40
Index
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 82
M
Manual registering radio station,
FM/AM radio ..........................................41
Max Volume, setup menu .........................62
Memory Guard, setup menu .....................64
Mono Movie, CINEMA DSP .......................36
Music Video, CINEMA DSP .......................37
N
Neo: 6 Cinema, surround decoder ...........39
Neo: 6 Music, surround decoder ..............39
O
On-screen menu language selection ........28
OPTICAL jack ............................................17
Optimizing speaker setting
automatically .........................................29
Option menu .............................................51
P
Panorama, setup menu .............................61
Placing speakers ......................................12
Playback basic operation .........................33
PLII Game, surround decoder ..................39
PLII Movie, surround decoder ..................39
PLII Music, surround decoder ..................39
Power cable connection ...........................27
Preset, FM/AM radio .................................41
Pro Logic, surround decoder ....................39
R
Radio Data System tuning ........................43
Random setting,
USB storage device music ...................50
Rear panel ...................................................9
Recording device connection ...................27
Remote control ..........................................10
REMOTE ID, ADVANCED SETUP menu ...65
Repeat setting, iPod music ...................... 47
Repeat setting,
USB storage device music .................. 50
Roleplaying Game, CINEMA DSP ............ 36
S
SCENE ..................................................... 34
SCENE, setup menu ................................ 60
Sci-Fi, CINEMA DSP ................................. 36
Select, setup menu .................................. 61
Selecting on-screen menu language ....... 28
Setting speaker impedance ..................... 14
Setup menu .............................................. 54
Shuffle setting, iPod music ....................... 47
Signal Info, option menu .......................... 53
SILENT CINEMA ...................................... 39
Sound, setup menu .................................. 61
SP IMP., ADVANCED SETUP menu ......... 65
Speaker connection ................................. 15
Speaker impedance setting ..................... 14
Speaker indicators ..................................... 8
Speaker placement .................................. 12
Speaker settings, automatic optimizing ... 29
Speaker, setup menu ............................... 57
Specifications ........................................... 79
Spectacle, CINEMA DSP ......................... 36
Sports, CINEMA DSP ............................... 36
Standard, CINEMA DSP ........................... 36
Standby Sync, setup menu ...................... 60
Straight decode ....................................... 38
Subwoofer connection ............................. 16
Subwoofer Phase, setup menu ................ 58
Subwoofer Trim, option menu .................. 53
Subwoofer, setup menu ........................... 57
Surround decoder .................................... 39
Surround, setup menu ............................. 57
SW.Trim, option menu .............................. 53
Switching front display information .......... 33
T
Test Tone, setup menu ............................. 59
The Bottom Line, CINEMA DSP ............... 37
The Roxy Theatre, CINEMA DSP ............. 37
Tone Control, option menu ....................... 52
Trademarks .............................................. 78
Traffic information ..................................... 43
Traffic Program, option menu ................... 43
TrafficProgram, option menu .................... 43
Troubleshooting ....................................... 68
TU, ADVANCED SETUP menu ................. 66
TV Audio Input, setup menu ..................... 60
TV connection .......................................... 18
TV FORMAT,
ADVANCED SETUP menu .................... 66
U
UPDATE, ADVANCED SETUP menu ........ 66
USB storage device music playback ....... 48
V
VERSION, ADVANCED SETUP menu ...... 66
Video device connection .......................... 23
VIDEO jack ............................................... 17
Video Out, option menu ........................... 53
Video signal flow ...................................... 75
Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 38
Volume Trim, option menu ....................... 52
Volume, setup menu ................................ 62
W
Warning message, YPAO ......................... 32
Y
YPAO ........................................................ 29
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE160A0/EN
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 29 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 FEATURES 5 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 PLAYBACK 33 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 PREPARATIONS 11 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 6 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 En 2 CONFIGURATIONS 54 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Setupmenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 65 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 APPENDIX 67 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 En 3 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • The illustrations of the remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model. • (Australia model only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 4 FEATURES What you can do with the unit • High-quality sound from iPod via digital connection . p.44 • Playback of music stored on USB devices . p.48 iPod Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. USB device • Automatically optimizing the speaker settings to suit your room (YPAO) . p.29 • Reproducing stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) . p.36 • Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . p.39 Audio Speakers Audio HDMI Control BD/DVD player HDMI Control Audio Audio/Video Video TV AV receiver (the unit) The ECO mode (power saving function) allows you to create an eco-friendly home theater system . p.63 Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) The unit’s remote control . p.34 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control . p.75 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.23) ❑ Creating high-realistic sound fields (p.36) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. CINEMA DSP allows you to create a natural and realistic sound field in your own room. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24). Video and audio are not synchronized... The HDMI jacks supports 3D and 4K video transmission (through output). Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.61). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.59). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. BD/DVD player CD player Game console I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese (p.28). Camcorder TV Set-top box ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18) ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.40) I want to update the firmware... The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.66). ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. • Scene settings (p.34) • Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.51) • Various function settings (p.55) • System settings (p.65) When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT CD TV TONE CONTROL PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA : 1 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.29). 3 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.4). 4 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.33). 5 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.41). 6 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.42). 7 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.40). VIDEO AUX VIDEO AUDIO A BC D E F USB iPod/iPhone 5V 1A G 8 TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.40). 9 Front display Displays information (p.8). 0 PHONES jack For connecting headphones. A INPUT keys Select an input source. B TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.52). C SCENE keys H D PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.35). E STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.38). F VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game consoles (p.26). G USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.48) or an iPod (p.44). H VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.34). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7 Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC iPod CHARGE SLEEP STEREO TUNED OUT 9 VOL. MUTE L SL SBL : 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.36) is working. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39) is working. 4 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.52) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED A 6 iPod CHARGE Lights up when the iPod is being charged while the unit is in standby mode (p.44). 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. > SW C R SR SBR B B Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) L Subwoofer 9 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 0 Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. A Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.33). Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 Rear panel 1 2 3 ARC ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 4 VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 CENTER MONITOR OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 5 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO 1 6 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–4 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). 3 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26). 4 MONITOR OUT (component video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.22). SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 7 89 0 A B 5 AV 1–5 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). 6 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.27). 7 AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.25). 8 AUDIO OUT jacks For outputting audio to a recording device (such as tape deck) (p.27). C * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 9 MONITOR OUT (composite video) jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.22). 0 SUBWOOFER jack For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15). A SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.15). B VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.27). C Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.27). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 TRANSMIT indicator TRANSMIT 2 3 Lights up when remote control signals are transmitted. RECEIVER SLEEP C HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). AV 4 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 5 MODE 6 FM AM 7 INFO MEMORY 8 9 : A B 2 4 Input selection keys V-AUX USB Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks AV 1–5 AV 1–5 jacks AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) TUNER PRESET MOVIE TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 5 MODE key ENHANCER TV SETUP CD RADIO D OPTION ENTER Control playback of the iPod (p.45) or USB storage device (p.48). C RECEIVER z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. D OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.51). E VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. F MUTE key Mutes the audio output. • (Australia model only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception (p.40). Switches the iPod operation modes (p.46). SCENE BD DVD 3 SLEEP key B External device operation keys VOLUME E MUTE F RETURN 6 Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio (p.40). FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. 7 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.33). 8 Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.35). 9 SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.34). 0 SETUP key Displays the setup menu (p.54). A Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.12) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.15) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.18) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.23) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting recording devices (p.27) Connect recording devices to the unit. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.27) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.28) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.29) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14). • (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 . Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. Speaker system (the number of channels) Function 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Subwoofer 9 Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. PREPARATIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ➤ Placing speakers ● En 12 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5.1-channel system 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 9 4 2 3 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 4.1-channel system 2.1-channel system 1 2 1 9 2 9 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for a 5.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. ■ Connecting speaker cables 5.1-channel system Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT Caution SURROUND CENTER (Connecting front speakers) • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. SUBWOOFER b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. Cables required for connection (commercially available) d Tighten the terminal. Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – + (red) + – 1 Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) b 2 c FR ON T d a - (black) 9 3 Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models only) 4 5 a Tighten the speaker terminal. b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug a FR ON T b PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (Connecting center/surround speakers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Press down the tab. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the terminal. d Release the tab. RO U a ND CE NT d ER b + (red) c - (black) ■ Connecting the subwoofer Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ VIDEO jacks ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. (Stereo L/R jacks) Video pin cable Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable. Stereo pin cable HDMI cable ■ Audio jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. • To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required. ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. Stereo mini-plug cable Digital Optical cable • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output) features. OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ■ Video jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Digital coaxial cable Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Component video cable PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 17 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection Method 1 (p.18) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) Yes ■ Connection Method 2 (p.20) No Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.75). ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. No Does your TV support HDMI Control? About HDMI Control ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. Yes ■ Connection Method 3 (p.21) No • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.59) in the “Setup” menu. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) ■ Connection Method 4 (p.22) HDMI • If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. HDMI HDM HDMI 1 HDMI OUT PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT • If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. ARC ARC ARC COMPONENT VIDEO When connecting a video device with an analog video output HDMI input (ARC-compatible) OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICA (CD) ( TV AV 3 AV TV • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 18 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Controlcompatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press SETUP. SETUP VOLUME RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ENTER e Check the following. SETUP Cursor keys ENTER d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. Sound ECO Function • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV Language • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20). e Press ENTER again. f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output TV Audio Input AV4 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN g Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.59) in the “Setup” menu. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI HDMI HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO 2 Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI OUT PR MONITOR OUT HDMI (BD/DVD) After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. HDMI input ARC ARC HDMI OUT 1 b Press SETUP. VIDEO SETUP OPTION OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL O O (TV) ENTER AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV VOLUME RETURN SETUP Cursor keys ENTER Audio output (digital optical) c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Sound ECO Function Language d Press ENTER again. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. Configuration On HDMI Control Audio Output TV Audio Input AV4 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN f Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Controlcompatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI input b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. HDMI c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. e Check the following. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. ARC ARC HDMI OUT PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV VIDEO OPTICAL OPTICAL On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. HDMI HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL O O (TV) AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control your iPod or USB storage device, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) When connecting any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on the unit. Video input (composite video) VIDEO ARC V (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI 4 V MONITOR OUT PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO 1 OPTICAL AUDIO 2 O O (TV) AV 4 • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.34), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) Video input (component video) MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO PR COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR PR PR PB PB Y Y PB PB ARC HDMI 2 HDMI 1 Y MONITOR OUT PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT Y (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL O O (TV) AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.18 to 21). • Connecting an iPod (p.44) ■ Component video connection • Connecting a USB storage device (p.48) Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24). Video output (component video) AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks ■ HDMI connection COMPONENT VIDEO Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. The unit (rear) PR HDMI 1–4 jacks PR PR PR PB PB Y Y PB ARC PB (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI output ARC Y COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR HDMI PR HDMI Y MONITOR OUT COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT C C Video device COAXIAL AV 2 AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or Audio output AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack (digital optical or digital coaxial) AUDIO OUT AUDIO 1 O COAXIAL MONITOR OUT COAXIAL O OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 PB Y PR (BD/DVD) AUDIO 2 Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Video Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 5 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Audio HDMI Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–4 AV 5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Video output (composite video) Component video AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) VIDEO V (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT ❑ Necessary setting V ARC HDMI OUT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. HDMI 3 Video device C C COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 Video output (component video) VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 COAXIAL AV OUT O AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO O OPTICAL OPTICAL L L L L R R The unit (rear) PR PR PB PR R R Y ARC PB PB (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDM COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, (either digital optical, AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks Y PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT L VIDEO L If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. AUDIO L R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 Y COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 A OU R L Video device R AV 5 • To watch videos input to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22). AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks R Audio output (analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. VOL. AudioIn 5 The unit (rear) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be used). ARC O (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 O ENT OPTICAL VOL. AudioAV5 PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO ITOR OUT 6 Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. OPTICAL C OPTICAL AV 1 C COAXIAL VIDEO COAXIAL MONITOR OUT L COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT A AUDIO 1 L L L R R R Audio device R AUDIO 2 AV 1–5 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–5 or AUDIO 1–2, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as camcorders and portable audio players to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna BD DVD INPUT TONE CONTROL CD TV PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX AUDIO VIDEO USB iPod/iPhone 5V 1A The unit (rear) The unit (front) V ANTENNA HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 AM FM SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND CENTER MONITOR OUT Portable audio player OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO 1 SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22). • You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device. • For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.44) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.48). Hold down Insert Release • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 Recording device connections 7 Power cable connection 8 9 6 Connecting recording devices You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input. 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5 jacks or VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5 jacks, AUDIO 1–2 jacks, or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit. • Be sure to use the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. VOLTAGE SELECTOR Video/audio input AV OUT jacks The unit (rear) V V 110V 120V ANTENNA L ARC L L R R (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 AV OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 AM FM 220V240V R HDMI 4 PR VOLTAGE SELECTOR The unit (rear) VIDEO Video recording device SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND CENTER AUDIO MONITOR OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 L L L R R R AUDIO OUT AUDIO AUDIO OUT jacks Audio input Audio recording device After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) ANTENNA AM FM SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND CENTER To an AC wall outlet SUBWOOFER PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Language setting 9 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE TUNING To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD 6 TV SETUP CD RADIO SETUP OPTION ENTER VOLUME RETURN Cursor keys ENTER 3 4 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. MUTE Setup 5 Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Language 中文 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Setup Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Language 中文 PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB RECEIVER z The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. The unit (front) MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SCENE BD DVD TV CD – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. ENHANCER SETUP • Please note the following when using YPAO. 1 RADIO – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. OPTION 2 – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. ENTER VOLUME RETURN MUTE – Do not connect headphones. 1 2 9 3 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 4 YPAO microphone Listening 5 position • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 3 Ear height Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the cross-over frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 9 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. The following screen appears on the TV. MAX Auto Setup Start Press SETUP key to Start Exit PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup TRANSMIT • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the measurement. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 • A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. • If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. AV AUDIO 5 1 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). V-AUX USB 6 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. MODE To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE 5 TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SCENE TV SETUP CD Measurement Finished Start Exit SAVE Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m RADIO -3.0 / 10.0 dB SETUP OPTION ENTER Auto Setup The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. ENHANCER BD DVD To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press SETUP. VOLUME RETURN MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.31). The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. Auto Setup Start Exit Measurement Finished Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / 10.0 dB 1 7 2 This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. Caution 4 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/ subwoofer) • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.31) or “Warning messages” (p.32). PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Auto Setup Start ERROR E-5:Noisy Error message Exit PROCEED 5% TV screen VOL. E-5:NOISY L SL SW C R SR Front display ■ Procedure to handle errors 1 Check the content of error message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. Error message Cause Remedy E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. To exit the YPAO measurement: a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Auto Setup Cause Remedy W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. Measurement Finished Start Result Exit 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / 10.0 dB Warning message W-1:Out of Phase TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) VOL. W-1:PHASE L SL SW C R SR Front display • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. ■ Procedure to handle warnings 1 Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32 PLAYBACK TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Basic playback procedure AV AUDIO 5 1 Input selection keys 2 V-AUX USB 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/ DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE TUNING INFO MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Switching information on the front display 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. VOL. ENHANCER 3 SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. AudioDecoder ENTER VOLUME VOLUME For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. MUTE MUTE • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.40) VOL. ProLogic • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.48) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. R SR About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. • Playing back iPod music (p.44) 4 SW C Item name Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. RETURN L SL L SL SW C R SR Information • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. Input source group Item • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.52). HDMI 1–4 AV 1–5 AUDIO 1–2 V-AUX Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) USB Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) TUNER * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.43). PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 33 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just one touch. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 1 V-AUX USB MODE AM PRESET INFO MOVIE TUNING MEMORY By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. SCENE TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER VOLUME RETURN MUTE SCENE SCENE Input Sound program Compressed Music Enhancer SCENE link playback BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off On TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On On CD AV 3 STRAIGHT Off Off TUNER MUSIC (5ch Stereo) On Off RADIO Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.33) • Select a sound program (p.35) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39) MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER BD DVD 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. TUNER FM Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. SETComplete L SL SW C R SR • (For Australia model only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. Refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. • The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.60) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 34 Selecting the sound mode TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.36) MODE TUNER FM PRESET INFO MOVIE Press MOVIE repeatedly. AM TUNING MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback (p.37) Press MUSIC repeatedly. Selecting a surround decoder (p.39) Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. VOLUME Switching to the straight decode mode (p.38) Press STRAIGHT. RETURN MUTE Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39) Press ENHANCER. • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM on the front panel. • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.38) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 35 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Sci-Fi L SL SW C R SR Sound program • When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. • You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.52) in the “Option” menu. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 36 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 37 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB Enjoying unprocessed playback You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. ■ Enjoying unprocessed sounds in original channels (straight decode) MODE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MOVIE TUNING MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO 1 OPTION ENTER STRAIGHT When the straight decode mode is enabled, each speaker produces its own channel audio signal (without sound field processing). When you play back 2-channel sources, such as a CD player, stereo sound is heard from the front speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit produces unprocessed multichannel sounds. VOLUME RETURN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. MUTE VOL. STRAIGHT L SL SW C R SR PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38 ■ Enjoying unprocessed multichannel sounds (surround decoder) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 1 2 For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.73). V-AUX USB 1 MODE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MOVIE MEMORY ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) SUR.DECODE ENHANCER VOL. ProLogic L SL SW C R SR Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER VOLUME bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. bPLII Movie Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for movies. bPLII Music Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for music. bPLII Game Uses the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for games. Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. RETURN MUTE “ENHANCER” lights up ENHANCER VOL. Enhancer On L SL SW C R SR • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz – High-definition streaming audio • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.52) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. • You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.61) in the “Setup” menu. Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39 Listening to FM/AM radio TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB FM AM MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE MODE TUNING TUNING • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. 1 “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. VOL. FM87.50MHz MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Setting the frequency steps ENHANCER TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER VOLUME RETURN Press FM or AM to select a band. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. SCENE BD DVD Selecting a frequency for reception (Asia and General models only) At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your listening environment, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. 2 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. VOL. MUTE 1 2 STEREO TUNED Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. z (power) • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PROGRAM 3 STRAIGHT • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.53) in the “Option” menu. Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 40 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) TRANSMIT When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. RECEIVER You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB FM AM MODE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MOVIE TUNING MEMORY MEMORY PRESET ■ Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT VOL. AutoPreset ■ Registering a radio station manually Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.40) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. ENHANCER • To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”. SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER OPTION VOLUME RETURN MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. 1 2 3 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. VOL. Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR Preset number AutoPreset 4 The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. VOL. STEREO TUNED “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset 02:Empty L SL SW C R SR VOL. 01:FM87.50MHz “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset number from which to start the registration • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 41 TRANSMIT RECEIVER ■ Selecting a preset station ■ Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. 2 3 Press OPTION. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB FM AM MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE TUNING PRESET PRESET VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT L SL SW C Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. R SR VOL. ENHANCER ClearPreset SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER OPTION VOLUME RETURN Cursor keys ENTER • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. VOL. MUTE STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. VOL. 01:Cleared L SL SW C R SR 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 42 Radio Data System tuning TRANSMIT • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. RECEIVER (U.K. and Europe models only) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AV AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB MODE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MOVIE TUNING INFO MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. OPTION VOLUME RETURN MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.41). 2 Press INFO. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. VOL. STEREO TUNED ProgramType L SL SW C R SR • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. 9850 • To cancel the search, press RETURN. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS L SL FINISH VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz VOL. SW C The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. R SR L SL SW C R SR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 43 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22). Supported iPods (as of October 2011) • iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.), iPod classic • iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone The unit (front) VOLUME RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT AUDIO USB VIDEO USB iPod/iPhone 5V 1A VOL. iPodConnected L SL SW C R SR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is connected, the iPod continues to charge (up to 4 hours). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 44 Playback of iPod content TRANSMIT RECEIVER Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO 5 1 USB • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.46). MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE TUNING 1 ENHANCER TV CD ■ Browse screen 1 4 iPod Music Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. SCENE BD DVD • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.46). • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SETUP • To switch the display to the browse screen during playback, press the cursor key (e). 2 V-AUX USB • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 2 RADIO Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers 5 OPTION ENTER VOLUME RETURN 3 iPod Top Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Music Video 1/ 6 1 List name MUTE 2 Contents list 1/ Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 2 3 Item number/total 4 Status indicators • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.47) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. iPod Now Playing Moves to the next page of the list. Artist Name Album Title Moves 10 pages forward. Song Title 2:30 5:10 Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 45 ■ Playback screen TRANSMIT RECEIVER 1 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 1 2 Album Title 2:30 MODE MODE 2 Song Title V-AUX Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. Artist Name AUDIO USB 1 iPod Now Playing AV ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 5:10 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE 2 TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 Status indicators ENHANCER Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.47) and playback status (such as play/pause). SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD Operational remote control keys Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RADIO 2 Playback information OPTION ENTER Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. VOLUME RETURN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. a External device operation keys MUTE External device operation keys Returns to the previous screen. RETURN a Function Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h f g External device operation keys d Skips forward/backward. j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). h j Searches forward/backward (by holding down). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 46 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings TRANSMIT You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB MODE MODE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. ENTER VOLUME RETURN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. MUTE Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 47 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 1 2 V-AUX USB USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs). MODE TUNER • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. Playback of USB storage device contents FM AM INFO MEMORY • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 48 kHz. Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. PRESET MOVIE TUNING ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD RADIO OPTION ENTER Connecting a USB storage device VOLUME RETURN MUTE 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 The unit (front) Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT AUDIO VIDEO USB iPod/iPhone 5V USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 1A USB 1/ • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device USB USBConnected 12 VOL. L SL SW C R SR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 48 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV AUDIO 5 1 2 2 V-AUX USB USB Now Playing MODE 4 USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 5 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 Artist Name PRESET TUNING 1/ 12 Album Title Song Title MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 List name 2:30 ENHANCER 2 Contents list SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP CD Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION 3 Item number/total ENTER VOLUME RETURN MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch the display to the browse screen during playback, press the cursor key (e). • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/random settings (p.50) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 49 ■ Playback screen TRANSMIT ■ Repeat/random settings You can configure the repeat/random settings for playback of USB storage device contents. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 USB Now Playing AV 5 1 2 Album Title Song Title V-AUX USB 1 Artist Name AUDIO MODE TUNER AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MOVIE CD • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. RADIO OPTION ENTER • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/random settings (p.50) and playback status (such as play/pause). SCENE TV Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. 1 Status indicators ENHANCER BD DVD 2 TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SETUP When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 FM 1 OPTION VOLUME RETURN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MUTE External device operation keys 2 Playback information 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause or starts playback of the previously selected song. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Random (Random) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Skips forward/backward. h j Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 50 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. OPTION VOL. Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 52 Adjusts the sound field effect level. 52 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 52 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 52 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 52 Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume during playback. (SW.Trim) 53 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. 53 Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 53 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 53 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 53 Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. 41 Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 42 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 43 Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.47) or USB storage device (p.50). — Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod. 47 ToneControl L SL SW C Page R SR Front display DSP Level (DSP Level) Option Tone Control DSP/Surround Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround) (A.DRC) DSP/Surround Volume Trim Lipsync Signal Info Audio In Volume Trim (Volume Trim) TV screen 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 51 ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) On Off Volume: high Output level Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Output level Volume: low Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. On Off Input level Default 0.0 dB Input level ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39). • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Adjusting with the front panel controls • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.39). a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. Settings b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Configures the sound field program and surround settings. Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default USB, TUNER: On (On) Others: Off (Off) ❑ DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Setting range -6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. Default 0 dB ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) ❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. Default 0.0 dB If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 52 ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) ■ Audio In (Audio In) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume during playback. Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output Default 0.0 dB • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) ■ Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.61) in the “Setup” menu. Input sources HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2 ■ Setup procedure • This setting is applied separately to each input source. (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) (default) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. ■ Signal Info (Signal Info) (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Displays information about the video/audio signal. Select “AV 5”, “AUDIO 1”, or “AUDIO 2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. Choices Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal Channel (CHAN) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/ LFE) For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal ■ Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. Settings Off (Off) (default) Does not output video. HDMI 1–4, AV 1–5, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. • To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 53 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 4 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Language 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Language • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 54 Setupmenu items Menu Item Configuration Speaker Function Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 57 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 57 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 57 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 57 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 57 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 58 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 58 Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 58 Distance Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 58 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 58 Enables/disables the test tone output. 59 Enables/disables HDMI Control. 59 Test Tone HDMI Control HDMI Page Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 59 TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 60 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 60 ARC Enables/disables ARC. 60 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 60 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 61 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 61 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 61 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 61 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 61 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 62 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 62 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 62 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 62 Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 62 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 63 Configuration DSP Parameter Sound Lipsync Volume ECO CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 55 Menu Function Language Item Function Page Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 63 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 64 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 64 Select an on-screen menu language. 64 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 56 Speaker Configures the speaker settings manually. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. ❑ Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Language ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. ❑ Surround • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings ❑ Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Settings Use (default) Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. ❑ Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100H z, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 57 ❑ Subwoofer Phase ■ Level Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Settings Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB Others: -1.0 dB ❑ Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. ■ Equalizer Settings Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel lowfrequency components. Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. ❑ EQ Select Selects the type of equalizer to be used. Settings • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.29). ■ Distance GEQ (default) Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Off Does not use the equalizer. Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Surround L, Surround R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) • “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.29). ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 58 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. HDMI Configures the HDMI settings. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Setup Speaker Equalizer EQ Select GEQ Edit Channel 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz Configuration HDMI GEQ Sound ECO Front L Function Language Back:RETURN 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ Configuration ❑ HDMI Control ■ Test Tone Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.75). Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. Settings Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.75) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 59 HDMI OUT (TV) ❑ SCENE Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2 Default AV 4 Choices (SCENE keys) BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO Settings Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Default BD/DVD, TV: On CD, RADIO: Off • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. ❑ Standby Sync • SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ❑ ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 60 Sound ❑ Dimension Configures the audio output settings. Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Setup Speaker DSP Parameter HDMI Lipsync Sound Volume ECO Function Language Setting range -3 to +3 Default 0 ❑ Center Image ■ DSP Parameter Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. Configures the surround decoder settings. Setting range 0.0 to 1.0 ❑ Panorama Default 0.3 Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Settings ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. • You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.53) in the “Option” menu. Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. ❑ Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. ❑ Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Setting range 0 to 7 Default 3 • “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 61 ❑ Adjustment ECO Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Configures the power supply settings. Setting range 0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms Setup Speaker Auto Power Down HDMI ECO Mode Sound ECO Function ■ Volume Language Configures the volume settings. ❑ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. ■ Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. Min/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. ❑ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. Default +16.5 dB ❑ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 62 ■ ECO Mode Function Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption by keeping the maximum volume, maximum output power, or front display’s brightness low. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Setup Settings Off (default) On Disables the eco mode. Input Rename HDMI Dimmer Sound Memory Guard ECO Function Enables the eco mode. • Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. Speaker Language ■ Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. Input sources HDMI 1–4, AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2, USB, V-AUX ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press ENTER. • To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Input Rename HDMI1 B l u - r a y OK:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN 3 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. • To cancel the entry, press RETURN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 63 4 5 To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3. Language To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Select an on-screen menu language. ■ Dimmer Setup Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.63) is set to “On”. Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Language 中文 Settings ■ Memory Guard English (default) English Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Settings Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Russian Chinese • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the following icon ( ) is displayed on the menu screen. • Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Memory Guard Memory Guard Icon On Back:RETURN CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 64 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 SPIMP.8MIN Set the unit to standby mode. Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). Settings z (power) PROGRAM 3 4 5 STRAIGHT 6 MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. REMOTEIDID1 Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Item Function Page SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changes the speaker impedance setting. 65 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 65 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 66 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 66 INIT Restores the default settings. 66 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 66 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 66 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control • (Australia model only) For information on how to change the remote control ID of the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. 1 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 65 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) Restoring the default settings (INIT) (Asia and General models only) INITCANCEL TUFM50/AM9 Restores the default settings for the unit. Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your listening environment. Choices Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Updating the firmware (UPDATE) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TVFORMATNTSC ALL UPDATEUSB New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. ■ Firmware update procedure Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL 1 2 3 4 Save the downloaded firmware to the root folder of a USB memory device. Press PROGRAM on the front panel to select “UPDATE”. Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack. To start firmware update, press INFO on the front panel. Checking the firmware version (VERSION) VERSIONxx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 66 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the front display when selecting an input source... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.29). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.57). By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.63) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.62). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.62). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.64). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.65). I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.75). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 67 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power and system Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.15). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.62). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.65). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.15). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 68 Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.62). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, select “5ch Stereo” (p.35). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.57). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.29) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.58). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.58). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.29) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.57). The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.59). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.60). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.60). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 69 Problem Cause Remedy The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.53). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.76). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. FM/AM radio Problem Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.40). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 70 Problem Cause Remedy Select the station manually (p.40). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.40). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.41). Cause Remedy USB Problem The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT 16 or FAT 32. Use a USB device with FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs. The folder structure not supported by the unit is applied. The unit supports folder hierarchies of up to eight levels and up to 65,000 files per level. If necessary, modify the folder structure on your USB device. Cause Remedy The unit does not detect the USB device. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. Remote control Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.65). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 71 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Connect error The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.65). Unable to play The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.44). USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Access error APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 72 Glossary Audio information DTS-HD Master Audio ■ Audio decoding format DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital DTS Neo:6 Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and Blu-ray discs. Sampling frequency/Quantization bit DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio WAV DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray discs). Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. DTS Express APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 73 WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 74 Video signal flow Information on HDMI Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. Video device The unit TV HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23). Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization HDMI in HDMI HDMI out HDMI • Volume control including mute HDMI HDMI • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO The unit turns off (standby) Playback device also turns off COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.34) • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO (Example) VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 75 To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 1 2 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.59) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”). 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals) • 576p/50 Hz • 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals) • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 7 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 76 Reference diagram (rear panel) ARC ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND Y MONITOR OUT Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 CENTER MONITOR OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AUDIO OUT AUDIO 1 SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 77 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 78 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 4 (AV 5, AUDIO 1–2, V-AUX [Mini Jack]) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) • Video - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz Component x 2 (AV 1–2) - 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4) • Other USB x 1 (USB2.0) Output jacks • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz Composite x 4 (AV 3–5, V-AUX) • HDMI Input Compatible Decoding Formats - 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game • Audio Format - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema - Dolby Digital - DTS Audio Section - DSD 6ch • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) - Dolby Digital Plus [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) - Dolby TrueHD [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 ) Speaker out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R) - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Front L/R..................................................................... 100 W/ch Subwoofer Out x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio Center ........................................................................ 100 W/ch AV OUT x 1 - DTS Express AUDIO OUT x 1 - PCM 2ch to 8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Analog Audio Headphone x 1 • Video • Content Protection: HDCP compatible [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) • Link Function: CEC supported Front L/R................................................................. 85 W+85 W MONITOR OUT - Component x 1 TUNER - Composite x 1 • Analog Tuner AV OUT [U.K. and Europe models] - Composite x 1 FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) HDMI USB • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Surround L/R .............................................................. 100 W/ch • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A Center ............................................................................... 85 W Surround L/R .......................................................... 85 W+85 W • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 ) [Korea, Asia and General models] Front L/R..................................................................... 135 W/ch Center ........................................................................ 135 W/ch Surround L/R .............................................................. 135 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) .................................. 110/130/160/180 W [Other models] Front L/R (6/4/2 ) ............................................ 110/130/150 W APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 79 • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 ................................................................................ 0.23 dB • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ............................. 120 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 )..............................200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 k SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 k • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ) .............................100 mV/470 • Frequency Response AV 5 etc. to Front (10 kHz to 100 kHz) ....................... +0/-3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Video Section General • Video Signal Type • Power Supply [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC [U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Other models] ................................................................... PAL [General model] ............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 [Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz Component [U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Cb/Cr ............................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p • Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB FM Section [U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz ..........................................................................100 dB or more [Asia and General models] Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less • Channel Separation AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) Bass Boost/Cut ............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz [U.S.A. and Canada models]..............................250 W/320 VA [Other models] ................................................................ 250 W • Standby Power Consumption [General model] ................................................... 0.5 W or less [Other models] ..................................................... 0.3 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ............................................. 470 W ...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 151 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6” x 12-3/8”) • Weight ............................................................. 7.5 kg (16.5 lbs) [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono ............................................................................... 72 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono .................................................................................0.3% Stereo ................................................................................0.5% Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz • Antenna Input................................................ 75 unbalanced Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz AM section Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz [Asia model].................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption • Tuning Range AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out) • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) [Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Tuning Range • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................ 12 dB/oct. [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 80 Index Numerics 2ch Stereo .................................................37 5ch Stereo, CINEMA DSP .........................37 A Accessories ................................................4 Action Game, CINEMA DSP .....................36 Adaptive DRC, option menu .....................52 Adjustment, setup menu ...........................62 ADVANCED SETUP menu ........................65 Adventure, CINEMA DSP ..........................36 AM antenna connection ............................26 AM radio listening .....................................40 ARC ...........................................................18 ARC, setup menu ......................................60 Audio device connection ..........................25 Audio In, option menu ...............................53 AUDIO jack ...............................................17 Audio Output, setup menu ........................59 Audio Return Channel ...............................18 Auto Power Down, setup menu .................62 Auto Preset, FM/AM radio .........................41 Automatic speaker settings optimizing .....29 C Cellar Club, CINEMA DSP ........................37 Center Image, setup menu .......................61 Center Width, setup menu ........................61 Center, setup menu ..................................57 Chamber, CINEMA DSP ...........................37 CINEMA DSP ............................................36 COAXIAL jack ...........................................17 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ........................17 Compressed Music Enhancer ..................39 Configuration, setup menu ..................57, 59 Connecting AM antenna .......................... 26 Connecting audio device ......................... 25 Connecting FM antenna ........................... 26 Connecting power cable .......................... 27 Connecting recording device .................. 27 Connecting speakers ............................... 15 Connecting subwoofer ............................. 16 Connecting to jack on front panel ............ 26 Connecting TV ......................................... 18 Connecting video devices ....................... 23 Crossover, setup menu ............................ 57 D Dimension, setup menu ........................... 61 Dimmer, setup menu ................................ 64 Distance, setup menu .............................. 58 Drama, CINEMA DSP ............................... 36 DSP Level, option menu ........................... 52 DSP Parameter, setup menu .................... 61 DSP/Surround, option menu ..................... 52 Dynamic Range, setup menu .................. 62 E ECO, setup menu ..................................... 62 Enhancer, option menu ............................ 52 EQ Select, setup menu ............................ 58 Equalizer, setup menu ............................. 58 Error message, YPAO .............................. 31 Extra Bass, setup menu ........................... 58 F FM antenna connection ........................... 26 FM radio listening ..................................... 40 Frequency steps setting .......................... 40 Front display ........................................ 8, 33 Front panel ................................................. 7 Front panel jack connection ..................... 26 Front, setup menu .................................... 57 Function, setup menu ............................... 63 G Glossary ................................................... 73 H Hall in Munich, CINEMA DSP ................... 37 Hall in Vienna, CINEMA DSP .................... 37 HDMI Control ............................................ 75 HDMI Control, setup menu ....................... 59 HDMI jack ................................................. 17 HDMI OUT (TV), setup menu ................... 60 HDMI signal compatibility ........................ 76 HDMI, setup menu ................................... 59 I In.Trim, option menu ................................ 52 Information switching on the front display .............................. 33 INIT, ADVANCED SETUP menu ............... 66 Initial Volume, setup menu ....................... 62 Input Rename, setup menu ...................... 63 Input Trim, option menu ........................... 52 iPod music playback ................................ 44 L Language selection, on-screen menu ..... 28 Language, setup menu ............................ 64 Level, setup menu .................................... 58 Lipsync, option menu ............................... 53 Lipsync, setup menu ................................ 61 Listening to AM radio ............................... 40 Listening to FM radio ................................ 40 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 81 M Manual registering radio station, FM/AM radio ..........................................41 Max Volume, setup menu .........................62 Memory Guard, setup menu .....................64 Mono Movie, CINEMA DSP .......................36 Music Video, CINEMA DSP .......................37 N Neo: 6 Cinema, surround decoder ...........39 Neo: 6 Music, surround decoder ..............39 O On-screen menu language selection ........28 OPTICAL jack ............................................17 Optimizing speaker setting automatically .........................................29 Option menu .............................................51 P Panorama, setup menu .............................61 Placing speakers ......................................12 Playback basic operation .........................33 PLII Game, surround decoder ..................39 PLII Movie, surround decoder ..................39 PLII Music, surround decoder ..................39 Power cable connection ...........................27 Preset, FM/AM radio .................................41 Pro Logic, surround decoder ....................39 R Radio Data System tuning ........................43 Random setting, USB storage device music ...................50 Rear panel ...................................................9 Recording device connection ...................27 Remote control ..........................................10 REMOTE ID, ADVANCED SETUP menu ...65 Repeat setting, iPod music ...................... 47 Repeat setting, USB storage device music .................. 50 Roleplaying Game, CINEMA DSP ............ 36 S SCENE ..................................................... 34 SCENE, setup menu ................................ 60 Sci-Fi, CINEMA DSP ................................. 36 Select, setup menu .................................. 61 Selecting on-screen menu language ....... 28 Setting speaker impedance ..................... 14 Setup menu .............................................. 54 Shuffle setting, iPod music ....................... 47 Signal Info, option menu .......................... 53 SILENT CINEMA ...................................... 39 Sound, setup menu .................................. 61 SP IMP., ADVANCED SETUP menu ......... 65 Speaker connection ................................. 15 Speaker impedance setting ..................... 14 Speaker indicators ..................................... 8 Speaker placement .................................. 12 Speaker settings, automatic optimizing ... 29 Speaker, setup menu ............................... 57 Specifications ........................................... 79 Spectacle, CINEMA DSP ......................... 36 Sports, CINEMA DSP ............................... 36 Standard, CINEMA DSP ........................... 36 Standby Sync, setup menu ...................... 60 Straight decode ....................................... 38 Subwoofer connection ............................. 16 Subwoofer Phase, setup menu ................ 58 Subwoofer Trim, option menu .................. 53 Subwoofer, setup menu ........................... 57 Surround decoder .................................... 39 Surround, setup menu ............................. 57 SW.Trim, option menu .............................. 53 Switching front display information .......... 33 T Test Tone, setup menu ............................. 59 The Bottom Line, CINEMA DSP ............... 37 The Roxy Theatre, CINEMA DSP ............. 37 Tone Control, option menu ....................... 52 Trademarks .............................................. 78 Traffic information ..................................... 43 Traffic Program, option menu ................... 43 TrafficProgram, option menu .................... 43 Troubleshooting ....................................... 68 TU, ADVANCED SETUP menu ................. 66 TV Audio Input, setup menu ..................... 60 TV connection .......................................... 18 TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu .................... 66 U UPDATE, ADVANCED SETUP menu ........ 66 USB storage device music playback ....... 48 V VERSION, ADVANCED SETUP menu ...... 66 Video device connection .......................... 23 VIDEO jack ............................................... 17 Video Out, option menu ........................... 53 Video signal flow ...................................... 75 Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 38 Volume Trim, option menu ....................... 52 Volume, setup menu ................................ 62 W Warning message, YPAO ......................... 32 Y YPAO ........................................................ 29 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 82 © 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE160A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
Yamaha HTR-3065 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-3065 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-3065 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-3065 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-3065 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha HTR-3065 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-3065 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-3065 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-3065 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-3065 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-3065 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha HTR-3065 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha YHT2910BT de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V375 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-3066 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-2866 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-4067 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-A820 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A730 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V675 de handleiding